Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Finally. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. such as mechanical equipment. such as duct. and plumbing engineering workflows. Germany. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. electrical panels. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. fixtures. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. electrical. 3 . and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and plumbing fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and piping.

Contact your CAD manager for more information. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Create detail views. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. annotations. For example. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. is located and accessed in the training files location. So. For example. you can choose to save your work. your Training folder may be in a different location. NOTE Depending on your installation. however. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. When you install the training files as instructed. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. However. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. such as templates and families. when you add ductwork. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. After completing each exercise. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. When you open a training file. You do not design entire systems. On the Contents tab. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. views. In this exercise. you learn where the training files are located. templates. as well as how to open and save them. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Metric: files for users working with metric units. and tags. Create schedules. and sheets to document the project. to provide a richer and more finished design. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

rvt and make changes. and you can open any supported file type. 8 If you have made changes. and click Save. For Files of type. 4 Click the training file name. select the folder in which to save the new file. a list of file types displays. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. Accessing Training Files | 5 . the Open dialog displays.rvt. For example. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. scroll down. For File name. enter the new file name. and click Open. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. click ➤ Save As. double-click Imperial or Metric. verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected. You may close the file with or without saving changes. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. 3 In the right pane. and click the Training Files icon. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. you are prompted to save the changes. if you open settings.

6 .

Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and phases when you need it. You learn the terminology. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. hence. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. If the length of the elevation is changed. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition. sections. and schedules required for a building project. drawings. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. ■ ■ 7 . In this case. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. schedules. every drawing sheet. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. quantities. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the operation of the software is parametric. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the parameter is one of association or connection. In the Revit MEP model. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. 2D and 3D view. the floor or roof remains connected.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the hierarchy of elements. scope. and plans. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In this case. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. As you work in drawing and schedule views. drawing sheets.

sinks. tags. sinks. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ducts. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. walls and ceilings are hosts. Examples include detail lines. and electrical panels. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. filled regions. and 2D detail components. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. dimensions. levels. For example. boilers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. sprinklers. grids. For example. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. and reference planes are datum elements. dimensions. They help to describe or document the design. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and electrical panels. When you change something. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. boilers. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. tags. and keynotes are annotation elements. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . They display in relevant views of the design. sprinklers. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Datum elements help to define project context. ducts. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. such as roofs. and ceilings. you do nothing to establish these relationships. section views. The project file contains all information for the building design. North . You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. views of the project. elevation views. Project: In Revit MEP. families. from geometry to construction data. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. programming is not required. In other cases. To place levels. In Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. or bottom of foundation. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. This information includes components used to design the model. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. However. and drawings of the design. and so forth). top of wall. Often. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you can explicitly control them. floors. you must be in a section or elevation view. For example. Most often.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. and types. some terms are unique to Revit MEP.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. for example. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. If you can draw. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. first floor. schedules. By using a single project file.

You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. or layer the views to see only the one on top. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. identical use. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Then experiment with them. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Unlike system and standard component families. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. System families can be transferred between projects. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). pipes. For example. hiding. However. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. A type can be a specific size of a family. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. You can also display several project views at one time.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. showing. A type can also be a style. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. System families include ducts. and similar graphical representation. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. With a few clicks. and wires. Type: Each family can have several types. For example. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. each in-place family contains only a single type. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. such as a 30” X 42” title block. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project.

or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. To return the panel to the ribbon. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides.

project and system parameters. and CAD files.. and settings. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. data and systems. architect-specific tools. select the tool first. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and for switching views. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for editing existing elements. When working on the Modify tab. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. then select what you want to modify. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.

provides access to common tools. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. closes the application menu (double-click). To keep a panel expanded. provides requested information. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. when adding duct. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . displays frequently used tools. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. For example. By default.

(Export) On the application menu. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. such as Export and Publish. click.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. (Save As) export the current drawing. select a file to open. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select a template and create a new drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands..

synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. to. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. provides views including Default 3D. but is not enabled by default. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. publish the current project. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.On the application menu.. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. family. Camera. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. or template file. (Licensing) close the file. To enable or disable a tool item. click. annotation. saves a current project.. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. and Walkthrough. (Publish) print the current drawing. family. (Print) access product and license information.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . annotation..

Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. when you switch to another editing mode. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. displaying the same information. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). or the Family Editor. When you are using a command. Clear the Status Bar check mark. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. This displays the command history in a list. Clipboard. workshared components. However. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. When you are highlighting an element or component. Group. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. To hide the Status Bar. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create.To undo or redo a series of operations. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Modify. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Starting with the most recent command. check the Status Bar. repeat the command. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. In addition. To show the Status Bar again. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar.

When you place an element in a drawing. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area.To cancel or exit the current command. On the Quick Access toolbar. for example. select one or more elements of the same category. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. To change existing elements to a different type. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. click (Modify). Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Place a Wall.

For example. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. After you are familiar with these tasks. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. 1 Click ➤ Open. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. click Training Files. In the following steps.

8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 6 Click in the drawing area. In the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. NOTE As you zoom in and out. To modify or add snap increments. this is referred to as a crossing selection. When you release the mouse button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. the view zooms in on the selected area. click . Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. on the Navigation bar. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Modifying the View | 19 . 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 9 To display SteeringWheels. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command.

The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 14 To exit the wheel. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click the SteeringWheels tab. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. To define settings for SteeringWheels. press ESC. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. ➤ Options. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click tin the Options dialog. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. and then using the Zoom tool again. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . As you move the mouse. Click and drag to orbit the design. moving the wheel to the desired location.

zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. 2 Enter ZR. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . bottoms.Design. as shown. called drag controls. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Small blue dots. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Similar controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Level 2 . referred to as shape handles. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.HVAC Plan . These are the drag controls. and select the duct. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. display along the ends. After you are familiar with these tasks.

or press CTRL+Z. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 6 On the Undo menu. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). click the Undo command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct.3 Click and drag the bottom control. All changes you make to a project are tracked. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. on the Standard toolbar. select the first item in the list. Move. In this example. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

Performing Common Tasks | 23 .8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Some commands. click to specify the starting position. for example. 11 With the duct already selected. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. After selecting the element to move. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and click again to specify the ending position. The duct is moved to the new position. 10 Move the cursor to the right. you want to move the duct. as shown. and drag it to the left as shown. In this case. such as Move and Copy.

(Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 14 Enter VG. Press ESC twice. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Click OK. For example.Return. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.Supply. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.End a command Some commands. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 13 To end a command. such as the Modify Ducts command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Select Mechanical .

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

use copy/monitor. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. such as coordination review and interference checking. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. New projects inherit all the families. In that case. create and manage views. under Template file. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse.rte template. 27 . the default building levels and standard views. such as ducts and pipes. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. system families. under Create new. and click Open. such as the default project units and settings. and loadable families. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. You can either select a template from the template library. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. click Training files. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. and geometry from the starting template. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. 5 In the New Project dialog. select Project. settings. link files. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. 6 Click OK. Finally.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and modify system settings. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You can choose from several templates. 2 In the New Project dialog. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions.

under Energy Analysis. for Energy Data. Click OK twice. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select School or University. click (Browse). NH. navigate to Imperial Templates. select Project template. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. create another new project using the Construction template. select Manchester. click Browse. For Location. review the construction materials listed. click Edit. In the Choose Template dialog. and open North. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click Cancel. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .rte template and click Open. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. If you want to use a template other than the default. For example. 10 Using the same method. 8 In the drawing area. select Level 1. (Browse). Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ For Building Construction. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you can select it now. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial.7 In the Project Browser. Click OK. When you select the material. for City. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. ■ ■ Under Create new. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered.

click Sizes. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 24 In the right pane. 10 1/2". Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 33 Click OK. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. click Wiring. 4 1/2". Click OK twice. Holding CTRL. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for 3 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. and fire protection systems. 27 Click OK. 25 In the left pane. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 11 1/2". and demand factors for electrical systems. select Views. 26 In the right pane. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 4 1/2". power distribution systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for 3/4".rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. piping. 5 1/2". 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 23 In the left pane. under Pipe Settings. click Round. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. and 5 1/2". click Rectangular. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. For Categories. for 3 1/2". select Identity Data. and 12 1/2". wiring. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. under Duct Settings. under Duct Settings. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 22 In the right pane.rfa and click Open. plumbing. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.

3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 5 Click OK. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. For Sort by. Notice that the file is saved as a template. For Then by. and groups that are contained in a project. select Associated Level. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 38 Close the file. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Linking Projects In this exercise. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. select Family and Type. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 2 In the New Project dialog.Origin to Origin. From the Positioning list. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Project. sheets. Click Open. For Then by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. click Browse. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. under Template file. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. select Auto . click Training. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. To enable this coordination. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. In addition. select Sub-Discipline. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. select View Name. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .rvt. under Create new. families. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

templates. or families. and change the name to My Library. click the My Library icon. and click Open. Load. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 15 Under Library Name. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. ➤ Open. Save. and select it as the library path. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click OK twice. and Import dialogs. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click My Library. and click (Browse). 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .11 In the Places dialog. click (Add Value).

The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Click Cancel. 2 In the Options dialog. 11 In the Options dialog. and decal image files.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 21 On the File Locations tab. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Edit. 14 Click in the drawing area. 27 Click OK. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 9 In the text editor. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 22 Select My Library. 12 Create a new project using the default template. select Ignore words in uppercase. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. If you work in a large office. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. If you want to relocate this path. click Edit. such as bump maps. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. This path is determined during installation. 3 Under Settings. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. click OK. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . click the Spelling tab. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. custom color files. specify the new location here. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 5 In the text editor. view the current path. click Places. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 20 Click ➤ Options. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit.

. 20 Under Settings. click File menu ➤ Save. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and enter 1 . You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.17 In the Spelling dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. work with snapping turned off. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 25 Close the file without saving it. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Restore Defaults. 2 In the New Project dialog. click the Spelling tab. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. delete sheetmtl-CU. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. under Template file. click OK. click Close. under Dimension Snaps. you modify snap settings. click Training Files. 21 Under Personal dictionary.rte. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 23 In the text editor. 24 In the Options dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . click Browse. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. In this exercise. 22 In the text editor. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 19 In the Options dialog. you modify snap increments. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Edit. 4 In the New Project dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 18 Click ➤ Options. You can turn snap settings on and off. click OK.

zoom out until it does so. enter SM. This is the increment that you added previously. deselect Chain. click OK. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. While sketching. 10 On the Options Bar. If it does not. and move the cursor to the right. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. TIP To zoom while sketching. For example. use the wheel button on your mouse. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . After you click to place the object at the midpoint. If you do not have a wheel button. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. snapping reverts to the system default settings. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’.7 Under Object Snaps. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. such as ZO to zoom out.

Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and move the cursor to the right. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the midpoint. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and specify the wall endpoint. with or without saving it. it will snap to the endpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall.. 19 Enter SM. 22 Move the cursor downward. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 25 Click OK. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and the wall edges. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Notice that snapping is once again active. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. If you move the cursor along the wall. 26 Close the file. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Do not set the wall end point. and delete the value 1’ .

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

autodesk. duct system and a hydronic piping system. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you first configure the linked architectural model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This system consists of a cooling tower. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. water source heat pump (WSHP). At the end of the tutorial. As you create the mechanical system. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 45 . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and then you create a plenum level. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. In this lesson. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you will understand the process. go to http://www. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you first plan the system. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. However. After finishing each exercise. In this exercise.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you can choose to save your work. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. By following the recommended workflow. you design a mechanical system for an office building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. methodology. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. If the tutorial training files are not present.

you add a level for plenums. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. click Training Files. In this section.rvt. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.Space Plan is highlighted. not in the MEP training file. Next. indicating that it’s the active view. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. roof. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. ceilings. NOTE When working with a linked file. and after the linked model highlights. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click to select it. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This makes the architectural components (such as walls.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. These components are defined in the architectural training file. and click OK. under Constraints. select Room Bounding.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and double-click West . Preparing Spaces | 47 . For Offset. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and enter Level 2 Plenum. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and click OK. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Click Plan View Types. 16 Press Esc. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. The new level is placed. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. enter 8'.6 In the Project Browser. and in the Plan View Types dialog. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 9 On the Draw panel. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added.MEP.

■ Click OK twice. and click Apply Default View Template.Plenum. For Cut plane. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. enter an Offset of 1' 0". 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Sub-Discipline. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. select Design. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . enter 0. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Level. click Edit. you place spaces in areas of the building model. select Plenum Plan. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. select Level Above (Level 3). and for Offset. However. and click Properties. Under View Depth. for View Scale. select MEP . you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Under Identity Data. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. Under Extents. for Default View Template. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. 20 In the Project Browser. For View Classification. right-click Level 2 Plenum.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. In this exercise. and then place spaces in various types of areas. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. NOTE After finishing each exercise. you can choose to save your work. for Top. In this exercise. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. for View Range. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 49 . walls. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. select New. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and ceilings). For (Tag Location). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. enter 0. select Level 2 Plenum. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. click Training Files. For Space. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Horizontal.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view.

8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ensuring coordination between the files. enter Library. enter 219. 9 Select the space. Click OK. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.7 Click to place the space. for Number. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. For Name.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 14 In the drawing area.

enter 0. For Offset. and then click Modify. 21 Using the method learned previously.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 51 . 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.

23 Click OK. you place a space in a large corridor area. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. and then split the space using a space separation line.

4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. and then press Esc. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Offset. 5 On the Options Bar. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . select Level 3. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.rvt. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 0. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. for Upper Limit.Space Plan is highlighted. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. as shown. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 11 Close the schedule view. 9 In the floor plan. change the space number to 216A. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and scroll to the newly placed space. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter Corridor. 10 Using the same method. In the schedule. double-click the space name. the plan view would have updated with the changes. which was numbered 219Q. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. and press Enter.7 In the Project Browser. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 16 Using the method learned previously. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space.15 Press Esc twice. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.Space Plan is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. click Training Files. you place a space in a chase. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If necessary. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. indicating that it’s the active view.

add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Interior and Reference. click in the chase area to place the space. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter Chase. For Offset. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. select Level 3. 10 In the plan view. In the plan view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 4'. Under Identity Data. For Number. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. expand Spaces. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. enter 225PC. right-click. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. and then click OK. On the Options Bar. for Name. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. For Limit Offset. and click Element Properties. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. select Roof Level. select the space. 6 Enter VG.4 Press Esc. 12 Click in the section view. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. enter 0. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .

In the next exercises. ceilings. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. and click OK. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.Space Plan. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. floors. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 Type ZF. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area.Bounding elements (such as walls. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 15 Press Esc. All spaces in the view are tagged. under Loaded Tags. select Space Tag With Volume. and maximize the view. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

3 Right-click in the System Browser. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . it is automatically added to the Default zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area.rvt. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned.Zoning is highlighted. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Reference. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. In this exercise. which removes the space from the Default zone. under Spaces. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. To display space reference lines. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click View ➤ Zones. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 1 In the Project Browser. After a space is placed in an area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.

Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and Electrical 220 spaces. Using the Edit Zone tab. you assign spaces to zones in the building. indicating that it’s the active view. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you assign spaces to a zone. and click OK. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and a new zone is created. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Energy Analysis. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. The new zone is listed in the System Browser.5 In the System Browser. and click Finish Editing Zone. Next.Zoning is highlighted. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and verify the zones in the System Browser.rvt. indicating that the space is occupiable. To display space reference lines. select Occupiable. 4 In the drawing area. Instruction 221. you can add or remove a space from the zone. The graphic in the System Browser updates. As you do this. and modify the zone properties. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Reference. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. The Zone tool is active. the Edit Zone tab displays. select Computer Lab 222. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. under Spaces. double-click 121 Cafeteria.

The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area. select HVAC Zones. type VG. Click OK. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. you need to activate the zone visibility. Instruction. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill).In the System Browser. Expand HVAC Zones. 5 With the drawing area active.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .TIP After you finish editing the zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Identity Data. You activated zone visibility in the views. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. click Training Files. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning is highlighted. click Reference.Zoning.West . 9 In the System Browser. To display space reference lines. enter 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. and click OK. In this exercise. for Name.West . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and verify the zone in the System Browser. under Spaces. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. expand 2 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Close the System Browser. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).Area B. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .rvt. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.

zoom out. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view to activate it. 9 With the Add Space tool active. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning floor plan.Zoning view. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 8 In the Level 1 . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . click in the Level 2 .Zoning view.5 Click in the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. Select Attached End. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

19 Close the file with or without saving it. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. enter Lounge . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.rvt. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.Zoning to make it the active view. for Name Value. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the corner where the Top. on the ViewCube. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building.East. Front. In this exercise. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. and click OK. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click Level 1 . and zone information.Zoning view. space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . click Training Files. you verify the building. double-click the zone tag. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it.

4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Click (Highlight). The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. click (Isolate). Next. With 109 Lounge selected. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Using the Highlight tool. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. verify that Wireframe is selected. and select 109 Lounge. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . you isolate the space.

and in the People dialog. verify that <Building> is selected. and then click OK. For People. and then click OK. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. select 109 Lounge. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. click . Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. click . and in the Electrical Loads dialog. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and click OK. For Electrical Loads. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. the space information displays for the selected space. Below the list of spaces and zones.■ On the Details tab. select Lounge/Recreation. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. For Construction Type. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. Next. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. select 1_South_Lounge. ■ ■ ■ Next. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. scroll down in the left pane.

00 °F : 54. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. This indicates the cooling set point.00 °F : 90. Below the list of spaces and zones. For Cooling Information. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. floors.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. Next. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. This indicates the outdoor air per person. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. verify that 74. click (Shading). you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. cooling air temperature. roofs. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. For Heating Information. This indicates the heating set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and other room-bounding components. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and air changes per hour. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. outdoor air per area. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. the zone information displays for the selected zone.00 °F : N/A is specified. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and dehumidification set point. heating air temperature. and humidification set point. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that 70.

Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Plenum. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Offset. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). enter 212P. enter 0. Under Energy Analysis. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Modify space properties 19 Select the space. open MEP . Click OK.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. For Name. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. click Cancel. 15 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. select Level 3. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Because this is an unoccupied space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. for Number.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . NH. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. for City. click Edit. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that the space has replaced the void. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. double-click Level 2 . and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis.Space Plan. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. click Training Files. verify that Manchester. click in the Value field. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. space. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.rvt. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. select School or University. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Energy Data. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. On the Place tab. and select space Plenum 212P. is selected. and zone information. For Postal Code. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. you verified building. under Energy Analysis. In this exercise. enter 03101. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. For Location.

Audio Visual. for Building Service. If. click Edit. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that New Construction is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Occupiable is selected. select Library . both. For Project Phase. For Ground Plane. ■ On the Weather tab. select Specified. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and enter 50 sq. right-click. and then click . enter 200 Btu/h. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Space Type. For Building Construction. a cooling load. For Latent. For Sliver Space Tolerance. select space Library 219. select Specified. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. and click Element Properties. In order to select a space. and click OK. and click OK. For Export Complexity. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. or neither. click in the Value column. for Values. For Sensible. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. for Values. ft. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. select Heated and cooled. Select Area per person. verify that <Building> is specified. under Volume Computations.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. you need to select this option. 8 In the drawing area. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. Under Heat Gain (per Person). verify that Level 1 is selected. and click OK. this option adjusts the times automatically. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that 1' 0" is specified. enter 150 Btu/h. For Condition Type. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For People. Click OK twice.

If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Electrical Loads.■ ■ ■ Click OK. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Select the space associated with the warning. Click OK twice. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. NH. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. For Location. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and under Heating Information. and click OK. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. click Edit. verify that <Building> is specified. For Building Service. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. is specified. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. click Calculate. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . verify that Manchester. select Actual. select Actual. You have verified the building information. click Information). for Values. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. 12 Click the Details tab. Under Power. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Next. and click to learn the cause for the warning. You should correct the space error in the building model. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. for Values. and can be modified here. verify that School or University is selected. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. select 219 Library. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. For Building Construction. There should be no warnings displayed. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays.

Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. space. 19 In the drawing area. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 17 In the loads report. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. In this exercise. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . click Training Files. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. For Color Scheme. 21 Click OK. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. indicating that it’s the active view. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and a loads report displays. select HVAC Zones. or zone information. and zone information for the building model. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. space. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. or make any changes to the model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . weather.Space Plan. Click OK. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. select 219 Library. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. under Energy Analysis. 16 After you review the loads report. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 In the drawing area. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 15 Review the loads report for project.rvt.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building.

8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. The new scheme displays in the view. in 1-ton increments. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.5 Zoom in to the legend. and click OK. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . select the color scheme legend. under Schemes. select Tonnage Range. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 11 Using the method learned previously. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

select Spaces. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In the next exercise. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. for Select available fields from.12 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. more category options are available. select New Construction. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building.rvt. In this exercise. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Click OK. Select Schedule building components. select Spaces.Space Fill is the active view. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. For Name. enter Space Airflow Schedule. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. For Phase. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i.

for Formula. In the Fields dialog. In the Calculated Value dialog. select Not Between. For Type. and then click Conditional Format. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Click OK. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click (Browse). add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. enter Airflow Delta. Header. select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. enter . select Number. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. For Formula. For Fields. select Level.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow.■ Under Available fields. select Air Flow. Select Ascending. select Airflow Delta. and click OK. For Then by. and then click . For Discipline. ■ Click Calculated Value. select HVAC. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and then select Hidden field. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Calculated Supply Airflow. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. and Blank line. Select Formula. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.

In the Color dialog. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. For Background Color. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In the next lesson. verify that Show is highlighted. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Under Conditions to Use. In later exercises. and click OK. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Click OK twice.■ ■ ■ For Value. In this exercise. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. a view opens that contains the selected space. click the color swatch. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. ■ The schedule displays. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. right-click to access schedule properties. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. select red.

78 .

Then. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP).Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. As you place the air terminals. In this lesson. After system creation. 79 . you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After completing the air systems lesson. you modify air terminal parameters. you will create supply air systems. and work with the airflow schedule.

3 In the ceiling view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the space crossing lines display. and scroll to space 223.rvt. click Training Files.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor.

17 Move the cursor down. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and press Enter.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 13 On the Options Bar. type 12. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and then press Esc to end the command. 9 On the Placement panel.Rectangular Face Round Neck . The schedule updates with the new flow data. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. the hosted elements are updated as well. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. If the host element is modified or moved. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . enter 425 CFM. select the diffuser.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and press Enter. as shown. verify that Constrain is cleared. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 15 On the Options Bar. for Flow. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. click Place on Face. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Also.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and select Supply Diffuser .

28 On the Placement tab. clear Leader. click Yes. 27 Select Return Diffuser . and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 24 In the Open dialog. and then press Esc. 22 In the drawing area.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. select one of the diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. As you place the return diffusers. click Place on Face. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. and click Open. as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 In the drawing area.rfa. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Next. 29 Place 2 diffusers.

and click OK. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. as shown. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. under Other. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click to select the lines. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . click Yes. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 32 In the Project Browser. for Reference. Level. select Strong Reference. select one of the return diffusers. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 31 In the alert dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

enter 9' 0"2750. 44 Zoom in to space 115. and click OK. click the Level 1 line. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. for Constraints ➤ Offset. For the start point. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 42 Press Esc to clear the selection.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. ■ ■ For the end point. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog.

rvt. However. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. right-click the title.HVAC Plan . IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. You then create the logical connection between the system components. the space crossing lines display.Press Esc. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . When you highlight a space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. including energy analysis. After creating the logical connection. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.Design is highlighted. and click View ➤ Systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.

15 Click Cancel. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. review the Number of Elements. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. the number of elements is updated. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and Flow value. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. System Name. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. As you add diffusers to systems. 12 In the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Connect Into. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. On the Options Bar. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 11 In the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223.

This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. for System Name. under Identity Data. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. for Mark. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. Rename the system Next. In this exercise. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and the system connects them. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. In this exercise. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.17 Using the method learned previously. 22 Click OK. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 25 Click OK. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. the air terminals are the children. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 18 Click OK. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. which updates the name in the System Browser.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. A Generate Layout tab displays. Also. and display solution 1. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. In this case. select the upper left diffuser. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. the space crossing lines display. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. the Network type provides several solutions. 4 In the drawing area. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.Design is highlighted. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. which provides various layout tools. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. select Network. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.HVAC Plan. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Solution Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt.

you’ll get an error in a later step. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Offset. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. as shown. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Select Branch. enter 3'. For Duct Type. click Settings. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Flex Duct Type. Click OK. enter 9' 10 1/2". click Modify. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Offset. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers.7 On the Options Bar. For Duct Type. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.Round. For Maximum Flex Duct Length.

select a different layout solution. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.11 Click Finish Layout. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. or offset elevations are incorrect. For example. Either relocate the system components. as is the elbow itself. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. or manually modify the duct. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added.

13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. and equipment.Flow. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. under Graphics. thus it is not part of the system. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. highlight a segment of the main duct. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. The first time you press Tab. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. for Color Scheme. and click to select it. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . If the entire network does not highlight. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Usually. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Using a flow-based color scheme. a disconnection exists.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. fittings. and click OK. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. but not all values are used in this view. for Values Displayed. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and then click OK. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select By View. select Duct Color Fill .

and press Enter. 20 In the drawing area. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Schemes. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select Duct Color Fill . 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. select one of the diffusers in the system. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Flow. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). 26 Click OK.Velocity. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. under Mechanical . and on the Options Bar. select the WSHP. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and click OK. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 .Airflow.

and enter . and then click to select it. select Calculated Size Only. Click OK. select Friction. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select 16". Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. and drag it to the right. Select Restrict Height. click Cancel. Select Only. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.08 in-wg/100ft. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). for Branch Sizing. Select the upper segment of main duct. The ductwork and fittings are updated.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Under Constraints. highlight a segment of the duct. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog.

so that you can modify the system design accordingly. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. static pressure. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. and pressure loss. Using this tool. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 33 Move the cursor over the system components.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 35 Click Finish.NOTE As you inspect a system. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.rvt. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. also known as the critical path.

2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and select the WSHP. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and click Draw Duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . indicating that it’s the active view. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Design is highlighted. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .

NOTE When drawing duct. click the corner where the Top. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Front. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Project Browser.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. select 9' 10 1/2". and click Draw Duct.3D MEP. right-click the connector grip. 15 On the ViewCube. for Offset. double-click MEP . Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select the top right diffuser. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. the color fill indicates the flow value. 22 Using the same method. in space 115. Also.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 19 In the drawing area. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. it is considered a closed loop. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. The ductwork is automatically created. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.

Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 25 Press Esc. You can ignore the warning. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. and select the top left diffuser. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the open end of the main duct.

and click to select it. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and then click Modify. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 30 Press Esc twice. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split).To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations.

Airflow. for Flow. and then click OK. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . such as a plenum. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. under Mechanical . 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. select a segment of the main duct. 40 Using the same method.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Constraints. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. clear Restrict Height. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space.

additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. 109 . You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Create return and supply piping systems. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. In this lesson. Then. and a cooling tower located on the roof.

click Training Files. you place mechanical equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . on level 3 of the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.rvt.

7 On the Options Bar.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.High Efficiency . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.2-6 Tons .HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted.Left Return . in corridor 328. as shown. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. and select WSHP . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Wall faces is selected.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Horizontal .

and in the Type Selector. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. click the dimension.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. as shown. and click to place the dimension. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and enter 2'. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the top edge of the WSHP.8 Click the corridor wall face. 10 Select the WSHP.

19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. for Water Flow. enter 12 GPM. Under Mechanical. as shown. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK.14 Click Modify. select the 2 WSHPs. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 9'. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Offset. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 .

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you create the return and supply piping systems. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . including flow and pressure. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.21 Click Modify. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.

where it is easier to review the information. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. right-click the Systems column heading. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.Mech 330).rvt. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 5 In the System Browser. analyses cannot be performed. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. but without a corresponding system. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. and click View ➤ Piping. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. You can create pipes to connect system components. Creating a Piping System | 115 .IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike logical connections (systems). Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.

12 In the drawing area. Therefore. This display indicates that the system is selected. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.In the System Browser. Notice that on the Options Bar. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. and the Edit System tool is not active. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. As you assign equipment to systems. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. while pressing Ctrl. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. select the 2 WSHPs. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. for System Name. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Assigning a system component to an existing system. 10 On the Options Bar. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components.

21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Creating a Piping System | 117 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. You have created the hydronic return system. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. and select the cooling tower. under Design ➤ HVAC .) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.Design. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 17 On the Options Bar.13 Click Finish Editing System. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.HVAC Plan . for System Name. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof .

Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. indicating the logical connection. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. In cooling mode. In heating mode. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 23 Close the roof plan view. and click Expand All. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 25 Select the boiler. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click Select.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 29 Right-click CHWS. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and bypasses the cooling tower. 28 Using the same method. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. and click OK. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).

and click Column Settings. You also manually modify the layout path as required. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. under Mechanical. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. you can view several parameters. 32 In the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click OK. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.In the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. for Water Flow. enter 18 GPM. and click OK. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. expand Piping. and click Properties.

and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Mech 330). You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 10 Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . select CHWR. A system preview displays in red. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. press Tab to highlight the system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.HVAC Plan . click Check None. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red).rvt. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 9 In the Select a System dialog. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). select Mechanical Equipment.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. When you draw a box to select components. and click to select it. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 5 In the Filter dialog. click Training Files. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can place the cursor over a system component. then the Select a System dialog displays. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the boiler.

It does not reference the architecture. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. duct. enter 1' 6''. or architectural components. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 13 Click Cancel. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. click Settings. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. select Perimeter. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. structural beams. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. verify that Solutions is selected. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations.11 On the Options Bar.

you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 19 In the drawing area. 17 Optionally. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. and the flow for the other is 12. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. With each Tab. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .16 Click Finish Layout. and press Tab 3 times. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. to display the path with thinner lines. the flow for one WSHP is 18. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 18 Place the cursor over the piping.

and click OK. and access its instance properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 23 Under Mechanical. under Mechanical. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 24 Press Esc. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 22 Select the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. Next.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. you physically close the CHWR loop.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. which propagates flow throughout the system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 28 In the Project Browser. 32 Click Finish Editing System.Design. double-click Level 1 . click Edit System. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Logically. the Number of Elements is now 8. 27 On the System Tools panel. On the Options Bar. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.

and then close the Instance Properties dialog. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. select a WSHP. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. 35 Using the drag control. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . access its instance properties. as shown. under Mechanical. 38 Using the same method. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. and click Cancel. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial.

select Perimeter 1 of 5. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.40 In the Select a System dialog. Click Settings. For Inset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. and then click OK. 41 Click OK. For Slope. enter 1' 6''. select CHWS. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. enter 0''/12''.

In a later exercise. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Modify. 48 While pressing Ctrl. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown. (Both sections are at the same elevation. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.

you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. select a different layout solution. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 51 Click Finish Layout. To create the piping system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. Either relocate the system components. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . or manually modify the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.50 Using the same method. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Add piping to close the supply loop. or offset elevations are incorrect.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the return pipes are magenta. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.rvt. as shown.Design ➤ 3D Views. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. double-click 3D HVAC Building.Design is highlighted. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. As you work in the training file.

as shown. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view.

8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the boiler. Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Click to move the piping. and press Esc to clear the selection.

The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 12 In the 3D view. and the lower one is secondary. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). The connections are automatically created. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. select the return pipe riser. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and click Draw Pipe.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the boiler. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 13 In the plan view. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system.

Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. enter 1' . 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.In a plan view. enter 2'. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. for Offset. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and press Enter. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ Move the cursor down. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.7''. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and you select 1 connector.

21 In the Select Connector dialog. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and click OK. and select it.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. as shown. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. As you place piping runs that are close together. and the appropriate fittings are created. select the primary base mounted pump. 18 Press Esc twice. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 19 In the plan view. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

and when the connector point displays. right-click the bottom connector. you select the tee fitting. 27 Move the cursor to the right. and click to draw the pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 29 If necessary. and click Draw Pipe. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. click to connect to the pump. 28 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

right-click the discharge connector.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. for Offset. select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. 33 Press Esc. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 4'. 31 On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. these pipe connections were created automatically. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and click Draw Pipe. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Offset.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and press Enter. type 1'. enter 9' 6''. and click to create the pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .37 Click Modify. you validate the flow through the system. You now have a closed loop system. and click Element Properties. right-click. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Next.

43 Press Esc. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . view the properties for the secondary pump.50 or 50% of the Flow. 42 Click OK. notice that under Mechanical. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 41 Using the same method. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 44 In the 3D view. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. In the Instance Properties dialog. Connect the cooling tower Next. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Cooling Water Flow. under Mechanical. the value is 0 GPM. 46 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. and click Element Properties. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . When you create the pumps in parallel. under Mechanical. right-click. as shown. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click Cancel. 48 In the plan view. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. and click OK.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.■ Lower pipe (outlet). 49 Press Esc.

You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.50 In the 3D View. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. When the valve is open. the water bypasses the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and close the dialog. click Training Files. and is heated by the boiler. Adding Valves In this exercise.rvt. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. select the cooling tower.

Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. The bypass valve is closed by default. as shown. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 8 Press Esc twice. Adding Valves | 143 . indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. and select Ball Valve . verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.HVAC Plan .

10 Press Esc. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 Select Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method. place another Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

20 Select the bypass valve. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. In heating mode. and select Ball Valve .) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). and click OK. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. under Mechanical. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and select Ball Valve . and click Element Properties.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. Adding Valves | 145 . For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 19 Using the same method.

Initially.HVAC Plan . validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM.Design is highlighted. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. as shown.22 Using the method you just learned.

5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Flow. select Pipe Color Fill . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Size. for Schemes. Sizing Pipe | 147 . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. click Pipe Color Fill . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. and click OK. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Select And. select Friction. Under Constraints. for Branch Sizing. enter 5 FPS. and for Velocity. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Click OK. and enter 2. and click to select the branch.25 FT/100ft. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 13 Press Esc. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.rvt. Using the System Inspector. click Training Files. pressure. or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components. Inspecting the System In this exercise.Design ➤ 3D Views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Inspecting the System | 149 . select a different layout solution. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.

5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. This information helps you modify the system design. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. and pressure information including pressure loss. An inspection flag reports the section number. flow. as required. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe.

In this exercise.88 psi. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. 9 Using the same method. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. as shown. inspect Section 6 again. you need to validate them. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. select 90° F. for Fluid Temperature.67 psi. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. targeting those systems that need attention. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and the Pressure Loss is 1.89 psi. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . the Static Pressure is 7. and to size pipe. 10 Click Finish. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.

the pipe is associated with that system. For example. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. After you assign components to a system.Design. As you learned when placing components. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. thus assigning the components to a system. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. and for pipe sizing. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. and click View. click Training Files. In the System Browser. 7 In the System Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3 . right-click the Systems titlebar. double-click Level 1 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. If you place components without assigning them to a system. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.rvt. After you have assigned all components to systems. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. Warnings display. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 4 In the System Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.Design. and click Show to view all of the system components. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations.HVAC Plan . Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.

13 Right-click CHWR. expand the Unassigned folder. and confirm unassigned system components. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system.HVAC Plan .Design floor plan. otherwise. click Close. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down.TIP If you have multiple views open. 10 Using the same methods. 12 In the System Browser. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. right-click Hydronic Return. and select Level 3 . you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and click Expand All. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.

154 .

155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

04. select Copper. You also add a wiring type. ■ ■ For Material.rvt. expand Wiring . Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. For Temperature. In this exercise you review electrical settings. enter 1. select Wiring Types. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. and demand factors that are applied in the design. For Temperature Rating.Wire Sizes. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. distribution systems. ■ Click New Correction Factor. click Training Files. Select Correction Factor. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. enter THHN. ■ ■ For Factor. select 90. click (Open). select Copper. wiring. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. Click OK. As you place components and create circuits. For Material. In the left pane of the Open dialog. speeding up the design phase. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select 75.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click OK three times. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. select Red. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Background Color. for Custom Colors.■ ■ For Value. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

power circuits.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Then. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create power loads. as you place lighting fixtures. Use the System Browser to check your design. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. 167 . Balance wire sizes and breaker service. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. First. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create a panel schedule. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing.

then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. select Orange. select the color legend. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . select the color for Less Than 20. 2 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Average Estimated Illumination. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. for the Spaces Category. Under Scheme Definition. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Basic Colors.Lighting Color Fill view is open. You can create additional color schemes. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. Click OK. In the Color dialog.00 fc. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. click Training Files. click (Open).rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.00 fc. By using orange as the color for this range. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.

expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). which is the lowest value in the specified range.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 .7 In the Project Browser. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 8 In the Project Browser.Lighting Ceiling plan. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.277. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The red field will clear once the +/. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.5 fc range is satisfied. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. zoom to space Library 219. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 13 Click the Level 2 . 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.5 fc range. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.

22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the fixtures will move accordingly. 19 Press ESC to end the command. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. select Multiple.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 18 Click to place the fixture. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

30 On the Options Bar. select the 3 fixtures.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select Multiple. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 28 In the drawing area. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window.32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the value in red for the space Library 219.

select Lighting Fixtures.277V. and for Category.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. 36 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

click the ceiling grid line as shown. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. Note the changes for the space Library 219. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .277V. 41 On the Options Bar.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . The lighting delta is satisfied. 42 In the drawing area. select Multiple Alignment.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. you modify the light fixture IES files.45 Press ESC to end the command. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. In the next exercise.rvt. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). click Training Files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .

Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Lighting Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.Lighting Color Fill plan. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. scroll to view space space Library 219. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.

click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ Click OK twice. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.85. enter 162. click the value for Initial Intensity. select Xenon and click OK. for Color Preset. for Apparent Load.00 lm. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. for Lamp. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. In the Select File dialog. Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics.277V and click OK. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. and click OK. Click OK. Under Photometrics.93. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. enter . for Type Mark. select Luminous Flux. Under Identity Data. In the Name dialog.ies and click Open. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . enter F15. ■ Click Apply. click the value for Initial Color. select T5 [HO]. enter . Note the lighting type has changed to F14. for Ballast Loss Factor. Under Electrical. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.00 VA. specify 15000. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. select 463T5_S. ■ Under Photometrics.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.

10 In the Filter dialog. and for Category.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None.277V. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. select Lighting Fixtures.

15 In space Library 219. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select the top center fixture. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.Press Delete. Note the lighting delta updates again. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 .

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

click Training Files. In the next exercise. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. junction boxes. Placing Switches. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Placing Switches. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 2 In the drawing area. Junction Boxes.rvt. and receptacles to your design. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. and Receptacles | 183 . Junction Boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open).Press Delete. you add switches.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 7 Click to place the switch. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

rfa and click Open. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. The element type Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 185 . 12 In the Load Family dialog. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Placing Switches.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Select Junction Boxes .NoLoad.

note the Number of Poles is 1. NOTE When entering values. Click OK twice. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. for Level 2 . In the Type Properties dialog. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . you can enter a space to separate the unit values. for Mark. enter JB-1NL.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. enter 9’0”. Under Electrical. Click Edit Type.Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 21 In the drawing area.14 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Library 219. 15 Select the junction box. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.

expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. NOTE If necessary. Space Number. Placing Switches. 23 In the System Browser. 24 For any column. and Receptacles | 187 . Select Load. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 26 In the System Browser. and Number of Elements. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. and Voltage. Expand General. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Junction Boxes. Click OK. Space Name. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Select Size. right-click and click Column Settings. Distribution System. Expand Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None.

188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 31 Close the System Browser.

38 Select the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 40 On the Options Bar. select Copy and Multiple. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 189 . Junction Boxes. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.

enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 42 Move the cursor down.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall.

and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes.

Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i.rvt. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. zoom to the space Electrical 220. and work toward the higher voltage. 2 In the drawing area. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). click (Open).equipment.

for Max. for Distribution System. enter 20. enter PP-2B. 9 On the Options Bar.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Loads. select 480/277 Wye. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 On the Options Bar.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. select 120/208 Wye. for Distribution System. 8 Select the panelboard. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. #1 Pole Breakers. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 14 Select the panelboard. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. Click OK.Surface: 100A. For Panel Name.

Click OK. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter 20. Click OK. which is the logical connection between the elements. 20 In the drawing area. zoom to space Instruction 221. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. click Check None. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. For Panel Name.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Loads. #1 Pole Breakers. for Max. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. enter LP-2B.

25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC. 33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch.

41 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. click Check None. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Wires. click (Open). for Hot Conductors. enter 2. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 38 Press ESC to end the command.Loads. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. except without wire. and for Category.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

and verify that Load. Click OK. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. expand Power. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. right-click on the Systems heading. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.rvt. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Distribution System. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Voltage. Rating. 13 In the System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and then expand circuit 1. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. Expand Electrical.

202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 30 Close the System Browser. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. under Electrical.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. Click OK. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. change the Voltage to 277V. 22 With the junction box still selected. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. click Edit Type. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 .Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click below the first one to place it. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. for Type Mark. under Identity Data. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 40 Click OK twice. Click OK. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. enter FR4. Click Tags. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 47 In the drawing area. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Click Yes. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Click OK. Next you create a switch system. Click Save. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. select Break. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 56 In the Filter dialog. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. For Circuit Number. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rfa. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. click Check None. enter a comma. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. for File Name. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 52 In the Save As dialog.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. and click Apply. Click OK. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Deselect Break and for Suffix. and for Category. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Switch System | 205 .rvt. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for Switch ID. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. enter a. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Click OK. under Electrical Lighting. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space.

21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. enter b. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.Lighting. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. under Electrical . 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Click OK. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. for switch ID. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor.

select the PP-2B panel. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 4 In the Filter dialog. and data systems. select Electrical Fixtures. click Check None. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Next you create a circuit and size wire. click (Open). Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 2 In the drawing area. Click OK. and for Category. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. lighting.26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Circuits are used for power. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In space Electrical 220.rvt.

Click OK. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. and in the right pane.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.rfa. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. enter 2. for Hot Conductors. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and click Element Properties. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical . navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. and click Open.Loads. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and in the drawing area. select Wiring. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 19 Click OK. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 13 Select the wire again. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.

21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 22 In space Electrical 220. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. and click to select the circuit. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. as shown.

add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 29 In space Instruction 221. in space Instruction 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. as shown. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.26 Press Delete. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click the connector of the first receptacle. 28 In the drawing area. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Next you balance the loads for your design. 3 In the Electrical space. zoom to space Electrical 220.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . 2 In the drawing area. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Finally. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.rvt. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select panel LP-2B. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. In the left pane of the Open dialog. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. click Open.

A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. for Rating. 6 Click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. Phase B 3636 VA.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 1-#10. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 1-#12. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Notice that the loads on Phase A. click Rebalance Loads. Click OK. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.3712 VA. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Scroll down.3616 VA). and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 1-#10. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 30A. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 14 Close the warning dialog. Under Electrical-Loads. and Phase C . B. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 1-#12.

Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. under Electrical . enter 25A. 17 Close the warning dialog. for Rating.15 Select panel PP-2B. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i.rvt. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. enter 30A. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. under Electrical . The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Click OK. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. for Rating. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Select PP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click (Open). and click OK. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. and click OK. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . click Training Files. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Loads. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B.Loads.

Under Body Text. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Project Browser. for Font Size. under Other. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit. Under Header Text. for Appearance. click (Open). and open E601 . 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Berlin Sans FB. 7 Select the schedule. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Font. for Font Size. select Bold and Italic. 11 Click OK twice. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. enter 1/8. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Under Header Text. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule.Panel Schedules. enter 3/32. 4 Close the report.rvt. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. expand Sheets (all).

In the System Browser. press TAB once. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Expand Unassigned. In the System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. select space Lounge 212. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. Checking Your Design | 215 . Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. each with a load of 180VA. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits.

216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 15 In the dialog. zoom to space Electrical 214. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Close the details dialog.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 18 Select panel LP-2C. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. for Panel. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select MDP-1. under Warnings. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 17 In the drawing area.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

right-click PVC .Sanitary. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 219 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In this lesson.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you create a PVC pipe type.Vent. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. click Training Files. and click Properties. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. in addition to loading existing families. planning is critical to a successful design. 2 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. Adding a pipe size. and verify that Level 1 . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. In this exercise. 4 In the Name dialog. type PVC . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. and click OK.

PVC .DWV: Standard. select Sanitary. click Pipe Settings. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P .rfa. select Tee. 17 In the left pane. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. enter 5/8''. under Pipe Types.0''. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.Sch 40 . 26 Click OK. In the Project Browser. 25 For Outside.Vent is listed. select Branch.PVC . 18 For System Type.Sch 40 . 27 For the new pipe size. Tap. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click New Size. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. for Material. and click OK.5 In the Type Properties dialog.PVC . select Tee Vent . Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select Sanitary. and click Main. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.Sch 40 . enter 10°. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 13 In the right panel. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 6 Click OK. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. click Modify. under Mechanical. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. enter -4' . for Nominal. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. enter 1/2''. Tee. click Training Files. select Plastic. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 21 In the right pane. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. PVC . For Offset. 10 On the Selection panel. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Cross. 15 For System Type. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 24 For Inside Diameter. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.DWV: Standard. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. select None. enter 27/32''.

Create the cold water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. 221 . and hot and cold water piping. add a hot water heater. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. vent. including plumbing fixtures. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. sanitary piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the hot water system.

rvt. as shown. including the men’s room (space Male 107). In the left pane of the Open dialog. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. NOTE To identify a space name and number. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. and verify that Level 1 . 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 1 urinal.Design is open. you add 2 toilets. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.Plumbing Plan .

1 wall-mounted urinal.Flush Valve . 4 On the Element panel. as shown.Wall Mounted. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. in the Type Selector.1. under Water Closet . against the left wall. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 5 On the Placement panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select Public . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .6 gpf. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. (Again. and press Esc. use the reference line to center the fixture. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.) 8 Press Esc.Wall Hung. above the first in the standard toilet space. zoom in closer.7 Click to place another toilet. under Urinal .

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. In placing the fixture. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .Rectangular. 12 On the Placement panel. under Floor Drain . select 5''x5'' Strainer .2'' Drain. 14 Click Modify. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). click Place on Face.

The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. a urinal. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. click Training Files. and Default Domestic Cold Water. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. In this exercise. and review the components listed under this system. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click View ➤ Piping. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If all disciplines are displayed.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and a floor drain. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click in the System Browser table heading.

5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and verify that Level 1 . draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.Plumbing Plan . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click OK.Design is open. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 6 In the plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 8 In the Filter dialog. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner.

for System Name.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. You include the bathroom space number in the name. If you deselected the drain. 12 On the Edit System panel. 11 On the Options Bar. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. expand Sanitary. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. so the Create Sanitary System is available. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 In the Systems Browser. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. click Finish Editing System. enter Sanitary 107.

a toilet. as shown. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click OK. The base is placed. for example. select Sanitary 107. A preview of the piping layout displays.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 16 In the Select a System dialog. select one of the components in the system. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.

25 On the Options Bar. 24 In the left pane. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The default settings are automatically modified.19 On the Options Bar. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. for Slope. for Solution Type. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 26 On the Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. for Offset. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. for Diameter. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 27 Click Modify. You accept this suggested solution. select Intersections. and for Offset. 23 For Offset. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 21 On Options Bar. click Solutions. and click Settings. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 4''. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and modify it to meet project requirements. enter -1' 0''. enter -4'-0”. and click OK. select Branch. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. select Main.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

31 Click Modify. as shown. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .30 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout.33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. select the fitting and click to reorient it.

adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. you continue with the work from the last exercise.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. and check the slope control.

4 On the Element panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Public. select 22''x22'' . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. in the Type Selector. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Design is open. click Training Files.Plumbing Plan .rvt.Rectangular. under Lavatory . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Placement panel. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).

select Multiple. On the Options Bar. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. TIP When entering dimensions. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. For example. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. enter 2' 4''. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. and press Enter to create a second sink.7 Click Modify. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 8 Select the sink.

click Add To System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 16 On the Edit System panel. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks. click Finish Editing System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. and press Enter to create the third sink. Press Esc. 11 In the System Browser. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the drawing area. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

19 In the 3D view. 20 Select the fitting. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Select the tee.Design ➤ 3D Views. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 22 In the plan view. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. under Design ➤ Plumbing . right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . with the tee fitting selected. use the ViewCube to orient the view. double-click 3D Plumbing.In the System Browser.

press Spacebar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click to draw the pipe. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In this example. enter 2' .6''. and click Apply.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. When you press the Spacebar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Offset. 27 Click Modify. for Slope.

30 In the 3D view. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.Sch 40 . and when the vertical center line displays.PVC .DWV. move the cursor over the stub pipe. under Wye 45 Deg Double .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 31 Click Modify. 29 In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 32 Select the double wye fitting. select Standard. click to place the fitting.

and press Enter. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 34 Press Esc. for Offset. enter 1'. double-click the section head to open the section view. right-click the right connector. In the next steps. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and click Draw Pipe.33 With the fitting selected. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 37 Select the fitting. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 6''. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . on the Options Bar.

40 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 41 Using the same method. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 42 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. as shown.

draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. press Spacebar.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. right-click the bottom connector. 49 Using the same method. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 47 Move the cursor down. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and click Draw Pipe. 46 In the section view. enter 6''. 48 Click Modify. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and press Esc. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.

52 In the plan view. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 51 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 53 Using the same method. 54 Click Modify.PVC . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select Standard. 55 In the 3D view. select the P-Trap on the left. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . under Trap P . 56 Using the same method.DWV. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

enter 6''. Move the cursor to the left. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. Select the double wye pipe on the left. In the plan view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the right sink to the double wye. select the left P-Trap.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 58 Using the same method. Click in the plan view. Click Modify. and press Enter.

under Pipe Types. In the Type Selector. select the section of pipe you just drew.■ In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. select PVC Sanitary. Press Esc. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select a proposed solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify the slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 62 On the Options Bar. for Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. click Training Files. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. adjusting the sanitary stack. click Finish.rvt.

and click Draw Pipe.PVC . 10 In the 3D view. select Standard. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and click the intersection to place the fitting. click Modify. 5 Select the tee. 7 On the Selection panel. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Sch 40 . Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design. 3 In the Section view.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Design. as shown. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Floor level line. select the elbow fitting on the right. and click to draw the pipe.Overall. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.DWV. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. right-click the top connector. 9 In the Type Selector. select the vertical stack.

under Plug . for Offset. enter 1'-0”. 18 In the plan view. 12 Select the fitting.Sch 40 .PVC . 13 Click the rotate control once.11 Click Modify. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 14 On the Options Bar. select Standard. as shown. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 17 In the Type Selector. 15 Press Esc.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. and verify that Level 1 . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.rvt.Design is open. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .19 Click Modify. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.Plumbing Plan . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select Domestic Hot Water.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Overall. double-click 3D Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. 4 In the right pane. for System Type. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.) 10 Click OK. 7 In the left pane. draw a selection box to select the toilets. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. and sinks. for System Type. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. select Pipe Types: Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 9 In the left pane. 6 In the left pane. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and click OK. select Main. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. 17 In the Filter dialog. select Plumbing Fixtures. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. if necessary.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. minimize the Sanitary system. select Branch. enter 9' 3''. select Pipe Types: Water. 15 In the plan view. expand Unassigned. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and click Main. urinal. click Check None. 14 In the System Browser. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. under Design ➤ Plumbing . expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Branch. select Domestic Hot Water. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . For Offset. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Domestic Cold Water. and for System Type. For Offset.

21 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. For Flow Conversion Method. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . enter DCW 107.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. In the System Browser. Notice that the water main displays in blue. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 19 On the System Tools panel. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. click Edit System. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view.

select 3/4''. for Offset. and press Enter. enter 4'0”. and press Enter. 30 In the plan view. as shown. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 37 On the Options Bar. and click to place the pipe. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 35 In the Type Selector. enter 3' . For Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. as shown. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. select the sink above the urinal. right-click the top DCW connector. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click the connector. 33 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. enter 7''. click to the left of the urinal. for Offset. connect the second toilet.2 7/8''.25 Using the same method. 34 In the plan view. For Slope. select Water. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. enter 0”/12”. enter 10'. 28 In the Type Selector. under Pipe Types.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 41 Select the top sink. and click to connect to the main cold water line.39 Move the cursor to the left. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 40 Click Modify. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 .

connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Close the file with or without saving it.44 Using the same method. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. you create the hot water system. add a water heater.

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. expand the Unassigned folder. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. 5 In the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select the 3 sinks.Overall. while pressing Ctrl. and verify that Level 1 . Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the plan view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.

When designing systems.6 Gallon. 10 In the System Browser. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . in the Unassigned folder.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. as shown. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed.Tankless. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 12 In the Type Selector. under Water Heater . for System Name. select 0. verify that DCW 107 is selected. and click Edit System. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click OK. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. Default Domestic Hot Water. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 15 In the System Browser. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Default Domestic Cold Water. In later steps. 13 In the plan view. 14 Click Modify.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. you edit the system to add equipment. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar. Slope: 0''/12''. Offset: 4' 6''. click Finish Editing System. right-click the middle left connector. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. for Offset. enter 1' 6''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. select the water heater. as shown. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . enter 10’. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 23 On the Options Bar. and select Draw Pipe. 19 Select the water heater. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 22 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit System panel. 24 Move the cursor up. 26 Move the cursor to the right. and click the water main line. 27 Click Modify.

for Diameter. enter 9' 0''. for Offset. and in the System Selector. 35 On the Options Bar. and on the Placement Tools panel. 38 Move the cursor to the right. enter 1' 6''. 36 Move the cursor down. 37 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. click Edit System. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. and for Offset. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. and press Enter. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). select 4'-6''. 30 On the System Tools panel. click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. enter 1''. as shown. 33 On the Edit System panel. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. select a sink. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select Domestic Hot Water 107.

enter 2' 8''. for Offset. and click just above the bottom sink. 42 Click Modify. and press Enter. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 41 Move the cursor down. enter 1’.39 Move the cursor down. 40 On the Options Bar. as shown.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .43 In the 3D view. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

After finishing each exercise. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. In this lesson. and click Duplicate.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you can choose to save your work. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. click Training Files. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You create a new pipe type. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.rvt. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. In this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. If the tutorial training files are not present. However. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model.autodesk. 267 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 2 Right-click Standard. go to http://www. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type.

NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. click Rename. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. verify that 9' 0" is specified. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Carbon Steel. structural beams. and then click OK. and enter Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For System Type. or architectural components. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. you create project parameters and work with schedules. In the left pane. select Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. under Mechanical. In the next exercise. However. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. select Main. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). 6 In the Project Browser. For System Type. In this exercise. Next. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For Offset. duct. you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. verify that 9' 0" is selected. 9 Click OK. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For Offset. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. for Material. select Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display.

right-click. click Add. for Name. and then click OK. 6 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.rvt. and click Element Properties. enter Sprinkler Zone. select Fire Protection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . For Group parameter under. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select space Instruction 221 as shown. under Fire Protection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Spaces. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. enter Zone 1. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design is highlighted. Under Categories.Fire Protection Plan . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. select the upper half of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the space crossing lines display. 8 Using a crossing window. 5 Click OK twice.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 13 Using the same method. enter Zone 2. including a calculated value parameter. under Fire Protection.rvt. and then click OK. select Zone 1. and then access instance properties. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 16 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. 10 In the Filter dialog. to which you add various parameters. you create schedules for sprinkler design. verify that only Spaces are selected.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. under Fire Protection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. for Sprinkler Zone. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection.

3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. The schedule displays. select Fire Protection. For Key name. For Type of Parameter. In the Maximum Spacing column.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . enter Protection Area Construction Type. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection.Fire Protection Plan . double-click on each column separator. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 14 Select the new header. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter 15. Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. click Add Parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. select Feet and fractional inches. 9 On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Light. Select Schedule keys. For Group parameter under. enter Maximum Spacing. select Spaces. select Length. 7 Click OK. select To the nearest 1'. 6 Using the same method. select Maximum Spacing. 10 In the Format dialog. click the Formatting tab. 11 Click OK twice. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. and on the ribbon. For Rounding. Obstructed-Combustible. for Name. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. For Name. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Click OK.Design is highlighted. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Units. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and click Field Format.

and press Enter. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Spaces. For Name. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. 16 Using the same method. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Click OK. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Unobstructed Ordinary. under Available fields. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Unobstructed Extra. enter 130.

select Minimum Sprinklers. and click View Properties. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. For Type. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Units. select Fixed. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). click . select Common. for Sort by. and click OK. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select 0 decimal place. Click OK. In the Fields dialog. select Area. for Sorting/Grouping. For Formula. select Level. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . For Rounding. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 22 Click OK twice. Select Header and Blank line. Enter the formula operator / after Area. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Then by. select Sprinkler Zone. select Number. click Edit.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. and click Field Format. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. For Discipline. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 20 On the Formatting tab. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. under Other.

On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. ■ In the Format dialog. and select Totals only. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and then select Hidden field. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Level. 26 Click OK 3 times. and click View Properties. 27 In the drawing area. For Fields. Under Field formatting. verify that Use default settings is selected. right-click the schedule. click Edit. select Hidden field. At the bottom of the dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. 30 Click OK twice. select Sprinkler Zone. for Filter by. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Level equals Level 2. select Minimum Sprinklers. for Filter. For Fields. select Number. select Grand totals. For Then by (second instance). 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Field Format.

Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. On the Formatting tab.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and select Totals only. select Sprinklers. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. Under Field formatting. and Count. click Edit. select Calculate totals. select Count. select Embedded Schedule. For Category. double-click Type. and click View Properties. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. for Fields. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. for Embedded Schedule. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Grand totals. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. for Available fields. System Name. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. delete the word Maximum. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 50 Access the instance properties. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. double-click FP . you are actually editing information in a database of building information. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 43 Click Cancel. select Ordinary. 48 In the floor plan. for Protection Area Construction Type. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Unobstructed. for Protection Area Construction Type. 44 In the schedule. 52 Click OK. but their values are not determined. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select space 221 Instruction. select Light. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. under Identity Data. and click OK. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only.Fire Protection Plan Design. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. select space 221 Instruction. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and the spacing parameter values are evident. and access the instance properties. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. As a result. Unobstructed. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 41 In the plan view. 46 With the space still selected. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. select Ordinary.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. 279 . The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. go to http://www. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. After finishing each exercise.rvt. you will understand the process. As you place the sprinklers. At the end of this tutorial. you can choose to save your work. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. By following the recommended workflow. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. methodology. and double-click Level 2 . As you create the system. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.autodesk.

When this happens. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When there is a small misalignment.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 3 In the Project Browser. After placing the initial sprinkler. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler.

7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. and click to place 3 sprinklers. 9 In space Instruction 202. 10 Press Esc twice. while pressing Ctrl. select the sprinklers that you placed.Pendent . Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and select Sprinkler . Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. as shown. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 11 In the drawing area.

verify that Constrain is cleared. Next. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. as shown. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 13 On the Options Bar. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Also.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then press Esc. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.

18 Type WT. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". enter 11. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . and click Element Properties. move the cursor to the right. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Offset. Notice that the schedule updates. 29 Press Esc.FP_Ceiling view. For Number. 19 In the floor plan. you adjust the offset. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. specify a vertical offset. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 200B.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. enter 14' 6". and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Fire Protection Plan . by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. This number is determined in the schedule. open Design ➤ FP . and 200C). 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and press Enter.Design. you place non-hosted sprinklers. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Next. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 25 Click OK. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. enter 10' 6". Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. under Constraints.

you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. and with piping (physical connection). After creating the logical connection. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. However.30 Close the file with or without saving it. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.rvt. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Unlike logical connections (systems).Design is highlighted. In the next exercise. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Fire Protection Plan . 1 In the Project Browser.

IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. within the Piping Systems folder.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Creating a Piping System | 285 . Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet. as shown. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 5 Right-click the header. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. As you assign sprinklers to systems. and select Piping. click View ➤ Systems. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.

In the left pane. and a piping layout preview displays. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. select Branch. 13 In the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2.Wet is selected. indicating the logical connection. For Pipe Type. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. click Settings. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. and click Select. Next. and number of elements in the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. and on the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. select an initial piping layout. for System Name. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. 11 With the system still selected. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. The Edit Piping System panel displays. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. For Offset. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. providing system editing tools. 15 In the drawing area. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 14 Click Finish Editing System. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. verify that Main is selected. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. enter FP Wet_Zone2. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 19 Click OK. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . system equipment. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and select the system. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . place the cursor over a sprinkler. press Tab.

click Solutions. In general. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter. and green represents branch lines). 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type.20 On the Generate Layout panel. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. enter -12' 0". 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 22 On the Options Bar. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. select 2". verify that Network is selected. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. When the layout is finished. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. as shown. click Place Base. 23 For Offset. and select solution 5.

288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. click Modify. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. A (parallel movement control) displays. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. On the Generate Layout panel. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 29 Click Finish Layout. as shown. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and various manual pipe creation tools. and then you create piping to physically connect them. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Either relocate the system components. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. or manually modify the pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Next. 32 If necessary.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. the Connect Into tool. or that offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.

click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in. 3 If necessary.

select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and pipe or duct is created. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 9 On the Edit System panel. air terminals. 13 Click Finish Layout. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. and so on) are logically connected by a system.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. you can select the pipe or duct. click Finish Editing System. 5 In the drawing area. and select solution 5. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 14 Close the System Browser. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 18 Click Finish Editing System. verify that Network is selected. radiators. verify that Solutions is selected. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 12 On the Options Bar. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Add To System. 8 In the corridor. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. for Solution Type. mechanical equipment. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). or a system component to display system tools.

right-click. and click Draw Pipe. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Using the same method. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then tile the views.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. select 9'. 23 View the result in the 3D view. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for Offset. 24 In the Piping Plan.20 Open Design ➤ FP . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 25 Select the sprinkler. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 21 In the Piping Plan. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 28 In the drawing area. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added.

31 In the plan view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Because the whole system highlights. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.

and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i.Fire Protection Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. ■ 6 Press Esc. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . for Scale.rvt. select 1/4" = 1'-0". 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. double-click on the section head to open the section view.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar. select 4". for Diameter.

as shown. and maximize the floor plan. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 25 On the Options Bar. and then tag the piping as shown. The pipe diameter is modified.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 26 Using the same method. 24 In the drawing area. 23 Close the 3D view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. for Diameter. select 1 1/4". select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs).

304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. In this exercise.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. In this tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. You added tags to pipes. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. For additional practice. you created a wet fire protection system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. create details.

306 .

Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 In the Project Browser. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If the view included detail graphics. and click Properties. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. you begin the construction documentation for the building project.rvt. 307 . and view references. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and apply a view template. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. matchlines. right-click Level 1. dependent views. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser.

9 Click OK. views and put them on the sheet. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 4 Using the same method. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 10 In the drawing area. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. and click OK. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and then press Esc. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. and click OK. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. as shown. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . more focused.rvt.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. create dependent views for areas B and C. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click Apply Default View Template. click Training Files. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 13 Press Esc twice. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 21 Using the same method. 19 In the drawing area. for Target view./ ---). select 11. select Double Dash 5/8". select black. For Line Weight. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. on the Options Bar. For Line Pattern. and then press Esc. and click OK.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Click OK. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . 14 Click Finish Matchline. 20 Select the upper view reference and. click the current value. In the Color dialog.

23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and zoom to each of the view references. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 27 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 25 Using the same method. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. as shown.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Zoom in.Domestic Water. Click OK. right-click 3D Plumbing. and click to select it.rvt. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. enter Plumbing Isometric . for View Classification. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply Default View Template. click Training Files. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. right-click Plumbing Isometric . press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 6 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. The section crop lines no longer display. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. 4 In the Project Browser. for View Name. and click Properties. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. For Sub-Discipline. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . select Plumbing Isometric. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Domestic Water. and select the section box. select Documentation. Under Graphics.29 Close the file with or without saving it.

and then click OK. For Pattern. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". The selected piping displays as a dashed line. select Dash. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. Click Apply. select 3. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it.9 Right-click. 12 Using the same method. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.

14 Right-click. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown).

On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. press Tab 3 times. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 18 Using methods learned previously. On the View Control Bar. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it.Sanitary Waste. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric .15 Press Esc. click Reveal Hidden Elements. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. In the drawing area. Right-click.Domestic Water view with detailing.

for Rounding. as shown. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. and click to place the spot slope annotation. and then place the callout view on a sheet. select To the nearest 1/8". 25 Press Esc twice. When the view is associated with a sheet. 21 Click OK twice. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Creating Callout Views | 315 . 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. For Slope. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. In the Format dialog. verify that Common is selected. you use a plan view to create a callout view. click on the Format value. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). select 1/4"=1'-0''. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 5 On the Options Bar. for Scale. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.

■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select 5. for Line Weight. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. drag it to the sheet. under Sheets (all). Creating Callout Views | 317 . ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. Click OK. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click M601 . using the same method.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for View Name. For Title on Sheet. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template. Click OK. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. right-click the callout view. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and select the viewport. enter WSHP PART PLAN.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

enter Typical WSHP Detail. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply View Template. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. under Names. and click Rename. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and click OK.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 25 In the Project Browser.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the detail view. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. duct tags. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. linetypes. and annotation to create a legend. 321 . ■ work with model-based components. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. symbols.

you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.rvt. as shown. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 8 With the text still selected. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C.

Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. select a supply diffuser. and then click Right Straight. as shown. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. a segment of round duct. and a segment of rectangular duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. 16 In the drawing area.9 Press Esc twice. Creating Annotations | 323 . 15 On the Options Bar. a return diffuser. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. verify that Leader is cleared.

under Category. for Ducts. and click Open. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. and click OK. click Load. 17 Click Modify. 20 In the Tags dialog.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 24 On the Options Bar. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 21 In the Load Family dialog. If necessary. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 22 In the Tags dialog. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. clear Leader.rfa. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. move diffuser tags off the ductwork.

Leader. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Creating Annotations | 325 . 26 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. select Horizontal. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 32 In the drawing area. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. as shown. 31 On the Options Bar.25 In the drawing area. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and Attached End.

click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. for Leader. select Free End. 34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. as shown.33 On the Options Bar.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. and lock lighting fixtures. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions | 327 .36 Press Esc twice. for Leader Arrowhead. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. select Dot Open 1/16". and all elements of that type are affected. select the last tag placed. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. lay out. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 37 In the drawing area. not simply an instance property. 40 Using the method learned previously. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. That’s because you changed a type property. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then select the interior face of the wall. On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 12 Press Esc. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. select the dimension line.

lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.13 Using the same method. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. and notes. linework. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. click the 3 interior locks on the line. annotation symbols. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . enter 8'. and offset them 8' from the wall. 16 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 329 . and press Enter. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Because the dimensions are locked. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 19 Using the same methods. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.3 1/2").

and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ 9 In the drawing area. click below the title to place the diffuser.rvt. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . For View. 10 Using the same method. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. enter Diffuser Legend. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Floor Plan.8 Neck. For Scale. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. select 1/4" = 1' -0". 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 5 Click in the drawing area.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click OK. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.

click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Creating a Legend | 331 . 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.11 Press Esc. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 14 In the drawing area.

DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 24 Select the component’s break line.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 26 Press Esc. 21 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.DROP and its text note. and then press Esc. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 27 While pressing Ctrl. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. The selected detail lines are now thin. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.

33 Click to the left of the left break line. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 34 Using the method learned previously. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. enter E.MECHANICAL LEGEND.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 35 Change the text on the right to N.30 Select Spot Elevation . and then click Modify. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. Creating a Legend | 333 . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 .

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected.

A drafting view using detail components. indicating that it’s the active view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. and text.Detailing 15 In this lesson.rvt. 335 . click Training Files. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A detail callout that references another view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.113 East elevation view. detail groups. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.

select each of the 2 panelboards. and click to place it. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. and then modify and align the views. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Next. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 8 Using the same method.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. place Power Riser . 5 In the drawing area. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.113 East on the sheet. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 4 On the Options Bar.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader.

15 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 13 Right-click. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click OK. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and click Activate View. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 12 Select the Level 1 line. select the 113 North view. giving the appearance of a single view. under Identity Data. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click Deactivate View. for Title on Sheet.9 Press Esc.

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. right-click. In the next exercise. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 19 Select the Level 1 line. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 21 Using the drag control. right-click. and click Activate View. you add wiring to the diagram. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 22 Press Esc. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. as shown. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. select the 113 East elevation view.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. click Training Files. In the Line Styles dialog. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . notice that there are no snaps active. 8 On the Options Bar. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Close the Project Browser. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . for Line Weight. In the New Subcategory dialog. enter Electrical Power. for Name. expand Lines. select 6. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and then click OK. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. verify that Chain is selected. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Under Modify Subcategories. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down.113 North view. As you draw. 9 Beginning at the transformer. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. click New.

11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing .10 Press Esc. as shown. enter 1/8".

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. so that the result is as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 29 Click Modify. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 Click above the cap. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

select Multiple. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 On the Options Bar. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .31 While pressing Ctrl. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.

43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. and then press Esc. enter 0 0.5. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard.36 Press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. 40 Press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length. for Offset. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . enter 3/32". click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.

click on the length dimension value. enter Ground.125. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and press Enter.25.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. for Name. 50 With the group selected. 46 In the Project Browser. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. Press Esc. and then press Esc. 47 In the drawing area. enter 0 0. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. select all 3 lines. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. you can ensure that they stay together. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . expand Groups ➤ Detail. Using the same method. and click OK. while pressing Ctrl. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.

54 Select the group.51 Using the method learned previously. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 52 Select the detail group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point.

348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click the copy. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and will place it on sheet E01. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. for Name. and click Rename. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. click Training Files. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 4 Right-click the ViewCube.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. In later exercises. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

and then press Esc. and then click the corner where the Top. click Home. Back. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 7 On the ViewCube. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and Left sides converge.6 Select the section box.

12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Walkthroughs. and click Apply View Template. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. select 3D Views. Under Names. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Click OK. select 3D HVAC Iso. right-click. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear.

as shown. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Move the cursor down and to the left. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Typical. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 19 Complete the text labels. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. (Right). 15 Using the same method. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to specify the second leader point. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1.

select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and under Extents.To rotate and reposition a text label. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select Crop Region Visible. under Extents. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click on the crop region. and then click OK. 25 Click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. as shown. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS.

click Training Files. select 3" = 1'-0". you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Properties. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Project Browser. Use detail lines to create a detail group.29 In the drawing area. right-click the view name. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. select the isometric view. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component.rvt. For Scale. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Place a detail component. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Drafting Detail Components | 353 .

select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Plumbing. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 9 Zoom in to the component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). For View Classification.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the point at the top of the drain. as the rectangle start point. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Click OK. 12 On the Element panel. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Documentation. 13 In the drawing area. for Sub-Discipline. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. as shown.

23 In the drawing area. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. select the filled region. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 22 Click Modify. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. and then press Esc. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 18 With the filled region still selected. and click OK.I. 20 Select 1. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Concrete. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 21 In the drawing area. for Type.P. select C. (Line).5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Press Esc. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain.28 Click Modify. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. and then click to select them. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. select Multiple. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 31 On the Options Bar. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

as shown. 40 Click Finish Region. (Rectangle). draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then select the side of the slab above the line. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then press Esc. 45 Using the method learned previously. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.

draw wide detail lines as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. select the Flashing Membrane group. 49 Click Modify. enter Flashing Membrane_F.. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. and then click to select them. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and click OK. press Tab to highlight the chain. as shown. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .D. for Name.

Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 61 Using the same method. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.55 Press Esc. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .

70 In the Keynotes dialog. 71 Click Modify.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. and then click OK. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.62 Press Esc twice. 72 If necessary. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. select Leader and Free End. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. and use the grips to resize the masking region. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 67 On the Options Bar.

74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 78 Move the cursor to the left.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and click to specify the text insertion point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 81 Select the text note. and click to specify the second leader point. 76 To select the leader start point. 80 Press Esc twice.

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.82 Continue annotating the detail. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 90 Press Esc. open P103 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and then press Esc twice. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 88 In the drawing area. select the view title. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. and click to place it.

For Layers. For Colors. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD.rvt. select 3. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. select Black and White. Click Open. For Import units. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. for Line Weight. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. For A-----NPP. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. select Auto-Detect. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. select Visible.dwg. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. you import a CAD detail drawing. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. Click OK.

10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Press Esc. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . open P103 . 12 In the drawing area. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and then press Esc.8 Type ZF. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the viewport title.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful